JP7469143B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Some conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined condition (the game ball entering the starting area) is met, display a specific display (a pending display or an active display) based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition on the display means, and can also execute a look-ahead prediction that suggests that a variable display based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition will be controlled to an advantageous state even before the variable display begins.

Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing pre-reading predictions (specific light-emitting effects) by illuminating light-emitting means provided on the gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

The present invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, capable of displaying a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game in the display area, and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each of the images arranged on the plurality of display layers in the display area;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a start condition,
the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that light emission from the light-emitting means is recognizable by a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode, and a special mode,
The special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode having a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special mode,
The specific display of the special aspect can be changed to either the first special aspect or the second special aspect,
The rate at which the specific display of the special mode is displayed when the specific light-emitting performance is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific display of the first special mode is displayed when the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and the light emission is terminated at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance is terminated.
When the light emission of the light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, a special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the light-emitting means at a specific end timing that is later than the specified end timing;
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image on a specific display layer,
The display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying images, capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J) and capable of displaying specific displays (e.g., a reserved display and an active display) corresponding to variable displays;
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
a specific display effect (e.g., a portion that displays a pending display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission effect (e.g., a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and an effect that displays the specific image in the display area (e.g., a CPU 120 for controlling the effect that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14-17);
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed), and is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during the variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than on the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (e.g., a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance, and since the specific light emitting performance can be made more prominent by emitting light not only from the first light emitting means but also from the second light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during the first period of the specific light emitting performance, the player can further easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance. Also, since a displaced specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when the image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, during execution of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image, which would reduce the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes the invention related to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing an effect (specific effect) in which an image displayed on an image display device (display means) breaks and scatters at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in JP 2019-141396 A. However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is conceivable to improve the interest of the effect by executing the effect while other images are displayed on the image display device. In this case, however, there is a problem that dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and there is a risk that the amount of data stored in the storage means may become excessively large. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of data stored in the storage means to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying images, and capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to a case in which image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in accordance with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an active display buffer. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. This figure shows whether or not a pending display preview is executed as a preview, and the decision ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a specific display start performance execution process. A diagram showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation A. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation B. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of the flash presentation when an early prize is won and the flash presentation when an late prize is won. A diagram showing the execution rate of flash effects when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. (A) is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp turned off. This is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at a low brightness (C2), and a front view of a pachinko gaming machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at a low brightness. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect in the modified example, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of lighting of the winning flash lamp, game effect lamp and starting gate lamp, display of the effect image and silhouette image, and operation of the movable body in the modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying the winning flash lamp and silhouette image in the modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation style in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. FIG. A diagram showing the display modes of the pending display and active display in the modified example, the suggested contents of each display mode, and the selection ratio when deciding to execute the flash effect when a winning prize is awarded. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a performance control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image; 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a display image processing process. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival performance in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation format of the pre-reading preview presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the temporary stop notification presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example. FIG. A diagram showing the presentation form of the variable display preview presentation and development suggestion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ, a specific display display start presentation) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (e.g., a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic performance starts (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed and the rotation animation of these pending display or active display starts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's attention to the particular display.

The gaming machine of aspect 3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
The effect execution means is capable of starting the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-29 (A) to Fig. 10-32 (H), when executing the specific display display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated as the winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific light emitting effect starts before the specific display effect starts, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made to stand out more.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means is capable of displaying the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start performance A in which only an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a specific display start performance B in which an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top after the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D or the active display area 135SG005A),
The duration of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (A) to FIG. 10-50 (D), the winning flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light-emitting effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state once, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), 10-49(A), and 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute a flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, a part that temporarily turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for players to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In the present invention, the "low luminance state" includes not only a state in which light is emitted at a low luminance, but also a state in which no light is emitted.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the display means to a low visibility state once and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect when winning, the brightness of a backlight or the like built into the image display device 5 is temporarily reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when winning is started).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for players to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the display means is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and also includes a state in which the visibility of the display is reduced by means other than a reduction in the brightness of the display means.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state while the variable display is being executed, and is capable of executing the specific light emission effect when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and Figs. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), a portion that can execute a flash effect at the time of winning when the preview effect is being executed and when it is not being executed).
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) is provided that can output a variable display corresponding sound (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28) corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance corresponding sound (preview performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light-emitting performance corresponding sound (winning flash performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance,
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light-emitting effect is being executed while the variable display corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the variable display corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when a flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, while the flash effect corresponding sound is output at a volume V1 (V1>V2)).
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the suggestive effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the suggestive effect corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when a winning flash effect is executed during the execution of a preview effect, the preview effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a variable display corresponding sound or a suggestive performance corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting performance corresponding sound becomes easier to hear, and the output of the specific light-emitting performance corresponding sound makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific light-emitting performance is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect from the sound output means in the specific light-emitting effect before the completion of the display of the specific display and the light emission of the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D), when it is determined that a winning flash effect is to be executed in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect allows the player to quickly recognize that a predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The performance execution means, in the specific light emission performance,
A sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when a prize is won from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-12, when it is determined that a flash effect is to be executed in response to the start of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning starts blinking, and then the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitted by the light emitting means can make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The specific light emitting effect is an effect in which the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness of C1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of a specific light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to prevent the first light-emitting means from continuing to emit light in the predetermined manner during the second period from interfering with other effects and reducing interest in the game.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a slow blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect is a portion that includes a period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner both before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting performance, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the subject, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning starts, the part that causes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The display means displays a specific light-emitting effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a second display mode in which the degree of emphasis is lower than that of the first display mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, a portion that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of early winning, and displays a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the first period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a first display mode, thereby making the player aware of the start of the specific light-emitting performance, and during the second period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a second display mode, thereby preventing the display means from continuing to display the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in the first display mode, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The display means displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a first display mode when a variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, a part that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when a variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourteenth aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect is provided;
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a second output mode having a lower intensity than the first output mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the specific light-emitting effect has started, and by not outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputting it in the second output mode while the specific light-emitting effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to other effects being hindered by the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, a part that outputs the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as modified example 135SG-1, the performance control CPU 120 stops output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, makes the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 invisible, and clears the process timer for the late winning flash performance, based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the late winning flash performance. During the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed as the late winning flash effect, and based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the selection of the late winning flash effect process table and the resetting and starting of the late winning flash effect process timer are performed again, thereby starting the late winning flash effect (the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the emission of light from the light-emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the provisional stop when the re-variable display performance executed in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70(A) to Fig. 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, a portion that continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C1 and cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during the provisional stop when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance continues (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70(A) to Fig. 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th aspects,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the later winning flash performance, during a pattern determination period of the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, a portion that continues to blink the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emission continues even during the display period of the display results of the variable display in the second period, the player's anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
In the display means, a game machine capable of executing variable display of a first performance identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) and variable display of a second performance identification information (e.g., a small pattern) having lower visibility than the first performance identification information,
During the result display period, the second performance identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), during the pattern determination period, the small pattern is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second effect identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) etc., during the execution of the winning flash effect, a silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right part of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end part of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display is overlapped with the display of the second effect identification information, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light-emitting means, when the specific performance is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance until the specific performance starts, and starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance when the specific performance starts (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90 as modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach that is the target of the win-time flash performance, before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked with brightness C2 and cycle T2, and from the start timing of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on with brightness C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means changes the mode according to the specific performance and emits light in a mode according to the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest in the specific performance.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, a portion that displays the first display area 135SG005F in white (whiteout) as shown in Figs. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and Figs. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O)),
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific performance start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance after being in the low-luminance state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90, during a white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the switch to the specific performance start image in between, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23 or 24,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the specific performance, a motion performance that moves the movable body at the start of the specific performance (e.g., a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 10-90) and a motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the motion performance (e.g., a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-90);
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the action suggestion performance is executed, and after being in the low-luminance state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action performance, which is a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body action suggestion performance, which is a white-out period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes between low brightness states associated with the execution of a suggestive performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light-emitting effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(A) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is not being executed, a portion capable of lighting up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light-emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in priority to the manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to light up (blink) in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect from starting at an inappropriate timing, such as the timing at which a special effect ends.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light-emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance may end at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, and at a second timing that is later than the first timing (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-119(A) and Fig. 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, the timing for ending the light-emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F includes the timing for starting the movable body operation performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, and the timing for starting the reach performance of the super reach).
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the first timing and when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the portion where the expectation of a jackpot is different between when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission presentation ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of a movable body operation effect or during the execution of a super reach reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 28,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a first performance (for example, a movable body operation performance shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a reach performance of a super reach shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4) during the variable display,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the first performance in association with the execution of the first performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance),
The light emission can be changed from a state corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a state corresponding to the second performance in association with the execution of the second performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission state of a winning flash lamp 135SG009F to a light emission state corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the first performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the second performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 28th aspects,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action effect (e.g., a movable body action effect) that causes the movable body to move, an action suggestion effect (e.g., a movable body action suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the action effect, and a specific effect (e.g., a reach effect for a super reach) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the action suggestion performance when the action suggestion performance is being executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion performance),
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the specific performance in association with the execution of the specific performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode is changed to the mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (e.g., display pattern α), a special mode (e.g., display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a special mode (e.g., display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special pattern includes a first special pattern (e.g., a display pattern γ) and a second special pattern (e.g., a display pattern β) different from the first special pattern,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the display pattern β is displayed).
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, a portion in which a hold display or an active display displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε can be changed to a hold display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the rate at which the winning flash effect is executed is higher when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε than when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, a specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether the special mode will change to the first special mode or the second special mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-first aspect,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, a white flashing mode as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIG. 10-17 );
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white color),
The specific display of the specific color has a higher probability of changing to the special color when the specific light-emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability of the display pattern of the specific display changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ differs depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the difference in the form of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player can pay attention to whether or not a specific light-emitting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to aspect 33 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31 or 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect, which suggests that a specific display displayed in the special mode will change to the special mode, in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a portion capable of executing the first action effect and the second action effect shown in modified example 135SG-5),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, the second action effect is a part that acts on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect will be executed in the first mode or the second mode, and by executing the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation that the change suggestion effect will be executed in the second mode.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-third aspect,
The special mode includes a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a second special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is higher than that of the first special mode (for example, the display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at the time of winning at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate when the second special mode is displayed, which has a high probability of changing into a special mode, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can heighten the player's anticipation of the specific display being displayed in the second special mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the specific light-emitting effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, and since the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise and increase his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 36 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of different types of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won),
The overlapping manner with respect to the specific display differs depending on the type of the specific light-emitting performance-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129(L) and FIG. 10-130(N) as modified example 135SG-7, the overlapping manner between silhouette image 135SG005S and active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a plurality of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays are displayed, and the overlapping manner with the specific display changes depending on the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display that is displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 37 is the gaming machine of aspect 35 or aspect 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., a hold display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., an active display) corresponding to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is started, and is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion that displays a silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in a first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, and displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in an active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and since not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, it is possible to provide the player with an even greater sense of surprise and increase his or her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 38 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display performance, and is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting performance corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the specific light-emitting performance, superimposed on the re-variable related display (for example, in the case where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash performance, a portion in which a silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash performance can be displayed superimposed on a special pattern (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the specific light emitting performance corresponding display, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 35 to 38,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the portion in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, and interest in the variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect can also be increased.

A gaming machine of aspect 40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 39,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to control the presentation so that the first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting presentation even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting presentation, and the light emission ends at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting presentation ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the win-time flash presentation, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 before the start of the reach presentation, and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the reach presentation).
If the light emission of the first light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the first light-emitting means at a specific end timing after the specified end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display to be performed due to the generation of static electricity, etc., a part that terminates the late winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern determination command), which is a timing after the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect does not end normally.

A gaming machine according to a 41st aspect is the gaming machine according to a 40th aspect,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game is provided;
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information notifying the end of the variable display when the variable display ends to the performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), a portion in which the CPU 103 can transmit a pattern determination command specifying the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern);
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 ends the flash performance at the time of the later winning based on the reception of a pattern determination command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the sense of discomfort felt when terminating the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be further reduced.

A gaming machine of aspect 42 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, a portion in which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of aspect 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 42,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific performance is being executed, the specific light emitting performance is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when a start winning occurs at the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the part that does not determine the execution of the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 43,
The effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the specified period, and is capable of executing the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is longer than the specified period (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of the winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light-emitting performance being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

A gaming machine of aspect 45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 44,
The performance execution means includes:
A specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can also be executed in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, a portion in which a reach effect of a super reach can be executed even in a variable display in which the variable display result is a miss).
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of a variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the flash effect at the time of the winning can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the special effects and the special light-emitting effects due to the special effects and the special light-emitting effects being executed at the same time.

A gaming machine of aspect 46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 45,
A specific area through which the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, a winning ball device 6A that forms a first start winning hole);
A specific light-emitting means (e.g., a starting lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes having different rates of control of the specific display to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, a portion in which a reserved display or an active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to γ having different jackpot expectations);
The specific light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light-emitting manner corresponding to the display manner of the specific display, regardless of whether the specific light-emitting performance is executed or not (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is determined that the display is in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is a portion that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the light-emitting manner of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinking as the winning flash performance or the game effect lamp 9, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting means provided around the specific area, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 47 is the gaming machine according to aspect 46,
The number of light emission modes that the specific light emitting means can emit is greater than the number of light emission modes that the first light emitting means can emit in the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-9, a portion in which the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission variation of the specific light emitting means is increased, which can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 48 is the gaming machine of aspect 46 or aspect 47,
The light-emitting area of the first light-emitting means is larger than the light-emitting area of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the light-emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash performance is larger than the light-emitting area in which the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting gate lamp light-emitting performance).
The period during which the specific light-emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition 1 is longer than the period during which the first light-emitting means emits light according to the specific light-emitting effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case where the execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the occurrence of the start winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the start opening lamp 135SG009S emits light from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented due to the first light-emitting means emitting light in response to a specific light-emitting effect for an excessively long period of time, while the player's anticipation of an advantageous state being achieved through the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting means can be maintained for a long period of time.

A gaming machine of aspect 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 46 to 48,
Both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are capable of flashing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, a portion in which a winning flash lamp 135SG009F can flash, and as shown in modified example 135SG-10, a portion in which a starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The blinking cycle of the first light-emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the blinking cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is different from the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 135SG)
Next, the characteristic part 135SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG. As shown in Fig. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a starting hole lamp 135SG009S for illuminating the winning ball device 6A (first starting hole) is provided near the winning ball device 6A.

Furthermore, a stick lamp 135SG009X for illuminating the stick controller 31A is provided within the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for illuminating the push button 31B is provided within the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135SG009Y, together with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d described above, constitute the game effect lamps 9 in this feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be lit (blinked) by control from the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

Figure 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG constitutes the first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes the second display area 135SG005Sa including the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D capable of displaying the number of reserved first special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, the second reserved memory display area 135SG005U capable of displaying the number of reserved second special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, and the caption display area 135SG005T capable of displaying captions showing the game status, the effects being performed, etc.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 135SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 135SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 135SG005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 135SG005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 135SG005F in this characteristic section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

Hereafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as the specific display.

Figure 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 135SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 10-4 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 10-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 135SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 135SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 135SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 135SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 10-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win."

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature unit 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 10-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 135SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 135SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 10-7(B). In this feature section 135SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this feature part 135SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 10-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed once, and a common normal reach reach reach performance is executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed twice, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed three times, and a common super reach reach reach performance is executed. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, an example is shown in which only one type of reach performance is provided for each of the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach performances may be provided for the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance.

The variation patterns in this feature section 135SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 10-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature part 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpot), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have different determination rates for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature part 135SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display result is determined to be a super reach fluctuation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when looking at the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed, if the variable display result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning, it is easier for more pseudo consecutive performances to be performed during the variable display than if the variable display result is not a jackpot with a high probability of winning. For this reason, this feature unit 135SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the change patterns in the variable display and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature unit 135SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved variable charts stored in memory being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 135SG is provided with a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 135SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 135SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 135SG151C, a game control flag setting section 135SG152, a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 135SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 135SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, the area for storing reserved display flags, and the area for storing winning flash performance target flags indicating whether or not the winning flash performance is the target of the winning flash performance described later, in association with the reserved memory number, and are divided into the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. 10-11 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start winning designation command, an area for storing the designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory number notification command, an area for storing the reserved display flag, and an area for storing the winning flash effect target flag that indicates whether or not the winning flash effect described below is the target.

In this feature section 135SG, if a start win occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 135SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this feature unit 135SG, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature unit 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 10-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start port switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the on state (step 135SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special chart reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special chart game using the first special chart, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special chart reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 135SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 135SGS103 or step 135SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 (step 135SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 135SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 135SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process proceeds to step 135SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 10-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 in Figure 10-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot game state. In addition, the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 6) determines the variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 135SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 135SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 135SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 135SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 135SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination table A and miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, this feature unit 135SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in Figure 10-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 135SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, i.e., the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 135SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 135SGS135), and proceeds to step 135SGS138.

Also, if the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variable pattern judgment (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 135SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 8. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 10-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 135SGS222).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command in step 135SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command in step 135SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command in step 135SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command in step 135SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the command received in step 135SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS227 is a variable category command (step 135SGS227; Y), If the command received in step 135SGS228 is the first pending memory count notification command (135SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A or active display buffer 135SG194B shown in Figure 10-11 (step 135SGS233), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In step 135SGS233, specifically, if there is no pending memory and the variable display is not in progress, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or the variable display is in progress, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command in step 135SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Next, the performance control process processing in this characteristic section 135SG will be described. As shown in Figure 10-15, in the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) and then executes a specific display display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) to execute a specific display display start performance as a display start animation for the pending display in the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 135SG005U, and a display start animation for the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) for executing a winning flash performance, a specific display rotation display performance execution process (step 135SGS164) for executing a specific display rotation display performance as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the reserved display or active display after the above-mentioned specific display display start performance has ended (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)), and a start port lamp light emission performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a start port lamp light emission performance in which the start port lamp 135SG009S is illuminated in a color according to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the reserved display notification performance ends, when it is determined that a reserved display notification performance is to be executed as a pre-reading notice in this characteristic part 135SG, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S177.

The specific display rotation display effect execution process in this characteristic section 135SG also includes a process of shifting each pending display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and a process of shifting the pending display to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and displaying it as a rotation animation.

Figure 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of Figure 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), it determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, whether the pending display notice performance as the pre-reading notice performance is already being executed (step 135SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small win (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a) and the variable category is identified from the variable category command of the entry (step 135SGS244b). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern based on the identified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 5% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is an 80% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 20% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 25% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 10% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 15% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 30% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 55% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In other words, this feature unit 135SG is set so that when the reserved display or active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate), and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in white, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a miss (jackpot expectation rate according to the display color of the reserved display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246). If it has been decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; Y), it sets the display mode flag of the entry to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern (step 135SGS247), and ends the advance preview setting process.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of that entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; N), then the display mode flag of that entry is set to "0" (step 135SGS248), which corresponds to not executing the dig display preview performance, and the advance preview setting process is terminated.

Note that, in this feature section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can be executed together as a preview effect for the pending display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can also be executed individually as different effects.

Figure 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of Figure 10-15 as the specific display start performance execution processing. In the specific display start performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed can be determined by whether or not the process timer for specific display start performance A or the process timer for specific display start performance B, which will be described later, is operating.

If the specific display start performance A or the specific display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not a start winning designation command has been received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command has not been received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is terminated. Also, if the start winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated reserved memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (263SGS273), and it is determined whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a). In addition, whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory can be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (the identified entry) is not the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255. If the entry is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), determine whether the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0 or not, that is, whether the entry is the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0, that is, the entry is not the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254; Y), proceed to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135SGS255, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for specific display start performance A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, it starts a process timer for specific display start performance A (step 135SGS256).

If the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), a process table for the specific display start effect B corresponding to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for the specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents of process data 1 in the set specific display start performance process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start performance execution process.

Also, if specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (process timer for specific display start performance A or process timer for specific display start performance B) by 1 (step 135SGS260), and determines whether the process timer for the specific display start performance that has been decremented by 1 (process timer for the specific display start performance being executed) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed has not timed out (step 135SGS261; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (step 135SGS262), and the specific display start performance execution process is terminated.

In addition, if the process timer for the specific display start performance currently being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for the specific display start performance is the last process timer for the specific display start performance (step 135SGS263). If the last process timer for the specific display start performance times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start performance ends (step 135SGS267) and the specific display start performance execution process ends. If the last process timer for the specific display start performance has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start performance is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next specific display start performance (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start performance execution process ends.

As described above, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning occurs and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) based on the start winning, or when the start winning is a start winning at the second start port, as shown in Figures 10-19 (A), 10-19 (B), and 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4), an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a specific display display start performance A in a position according to the number of hold memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the hold memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display display start performance A is approximately 0.2 seconds. After the specific display display start performance A ends, the pending display (active display) transitions to a display with a rotating animation in the active display area 135SG005A or pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U as with other pending displays and active displays, as the specific display rotating display performance described above.

In addition, when a start winning occurs, and the execution of a pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) is determined based on the start winning, and the start winning is a start winning to the first start port, as shown in Figures 10-20 (A) to 10-20 (C), 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), as a specific display display start performance B, first, an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. After character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, a variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special reserved memory already exists, an animation of character A moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, character A is displayed overlapping with a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

When character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), an animation is displayed in which character A attacks (acts) the position where the pending display is displayed based on the initial winning. When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this characteristic part 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display display start performance B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the reserved display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display display start performance B is executed for the reserved display of the first special chart, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the reserved display based on the start winning. Then, the reserved display after the specific display display start performance B ends transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the specific display rotation display performance described above, just like other reserved displays and active displays.

When character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start performance B, if the variable display is not being executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special chart reserved memory does not exist, an animation of character A moving to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position where the active display is displayed based on the start winning, i.e., the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed, as in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4). When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this feature 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start performance B is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the period from the end of that animation to the end of the active display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display start performance B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the start winning. Then, after the specific display start performance B ends, the active display transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotation display performance described above.

Figures 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of Figure 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and determines whether there are any entries in the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2", i.e., whether the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate (step 135SGS274). Whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate can be determined from the start gate winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on a start winning into the first start port (step 135SGS274; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 135SGS275). If the game state is normal (step 135SGS275; Y), it further judges whether the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3, that is, whether the game state is a big win game state or a small win game state (step 135SGS276). If the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), it judges whether the variable category of the entry (an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is a super reach or not (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is Super Reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 or not, i.e., whether variable display is being executed or not (step 135SGS278). If the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a reach performance is being executed or not (step 135SGS279). Whether a reach performance is being executed or not can be determined from the contents of the variable display process data, etc.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135 SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135 SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance when a win occurs based on the variable display result. Note that the variable display result can be determined from the design specification command of an entry for which the flash performance target flag when a win occurs is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is a miss, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 10%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 90%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 20%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if the winning flash effect is executed from the start of the winning, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is set to be higher than if the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b; Y), the CPU 120 sets the flash effect target flag for the entry (the entry for which the flash effect target flag for the prize is not set) to "1" indicating that the entry is a pending memory for the flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG280), and turns on the flash effect execution flag for the prize (step 135SG280a). It selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period, starts a process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the early winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 flash in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash effect for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the initial winning (as shown in Figures 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B) the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly turned on and off at high brightness C1), a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and an effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. The winning flash effect corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG is divided into a first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the first-term winning flash effect, and a second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the second-term winning flash effect. Of these, the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character that is output once. Also, the second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a longer output period than the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound such as a dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 135SG, in addition to the winning flash effect corresponding sound described above, multiple performance sounds such as the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound described below can be simultaneously output from the speakers 8L and 8R using different channels at different volumes.

If the entry is based on a win at the second starting port (step 135SG274; N), if the game state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), if the effect control process flag is not 0 to 3 (step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not a super reach (step 135SG277; N), if a reach effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute a flash effect when a win is generated (step 135SG279b), the flash effect target flag for the entry when a win is generated is set to "0" (step 135SG279c), indicating that the entry is not eligible for the flash effect when a win is generated, and the flash effect execution process when a win is generated is terminated.

Also, if the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and it is judged whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect after decrementing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect that is currently running (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect switches the process data, starts the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period (steps 135SGS289, 135SGS290, 135SGS291), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance. In addition, the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash performance execution process is terminated. In addition, as a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode according to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be illuminated in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, if the last process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage (step 135SGS294). Then, it selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, starts the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the later winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect from the end of the earlier winning flash effect to the start of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, and the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A modeled by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. As a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red, as in the earlier winning flash effect. In addition, because the flash effect for later winning is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect for earlier winning (see Figure 10-28), the actual light emitted by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the flash effect for later winning will be darker than the flash effect for earlier winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) is repeatedly turned on (blinking) and off at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 described above during the period except when the flash effect is being performed. In particular, the blinking period at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking period during the execution of the flash effect when the previous stage wins, and during the blinking period, as shown in FIG. 10-27(B) to FIG. 10-27(D), the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the light color in stages at multiple points in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period except when the flash effect when the previous stage wins is being performed makes a lesser impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash effect when the previous stage wins.

Also, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of early prize winning is not running in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning is running (step 135SGS284; N), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and determines whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that is currently running (step 135SGS300), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next flash effect at the time of the later winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the last flash effect at the time of late winning expires (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for the first flash effect at the time of late winning starts, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In step 135SGS307, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash performance. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309) and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, whether the variable display being executed is a variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance (step 135SGS310). If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process ends. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it determines whether it is the start timing of the reach performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the later winning flash effect, turns off the winning flash effect execution flag (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and ends the winning flash effect execution process.

Also, if it is not the timing to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a). If a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a; Y), the later winning flash effect ends, the winning flash effect execution flag is turned off (steps 135SGS312, 135SGS313), and the winning flash effect execution process ends. If a symbol determination command has not been received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process ends without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in this feature section 135SG is an effect that ends when a predetermined performance period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is an effect that is executed repeatedly without ending every time a certain period of time has elapsed until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the performance target.

In addition, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to static electricity or the like during the execution of the later winning flash performance, it is possible to end the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is later than the start timing of the reach performance.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 10-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when an early prize is won, and selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when a late prize is won. In other words, the performance patterns (performance periods) of the flash performance when an early prize is won and the flash performance when a late prize is won in this feature section 135SG are always executed in the same performance mode and for the same performance period, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc.

Figure 10-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (steps 135SGS351, 135SGS352, and 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135SGS358). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 135SGS360).

In particular, the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360 are as follows: the performance control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 lower than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG refers to background music corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, background music corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive performances executed during the variable display, etc. In addition, when the flash effect for winning a previous period is not being executed (step 135SGS362; N), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), whereas when the flash effect for winning a previous period is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect for winning a previous period).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In this preview performance execution process, for example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display execution and in which performance pattern the preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to execute the preview performance according to the determination result. Also, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, it is possible to make the proportion of the preview performance controlled to the jackpot game state different depending on which performance pattern the preview performance is executed in by determining one performance pattern from multiple performance patterns at different rates depending on the variable display result.

The preview effect executed in this feature section 135SG is a line preview effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on the lines displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

In addition, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will transition to stopping the variable display. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern designation command indicating a long variable time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used to control the variable display of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the performance control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, the operation of each of the presentation devices when the winning flash presentation in the characteristic part 135SG is executed will be described with reference to Figs. 10-28 to 10-68. First, Fig. 10-28 is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning. Fig. 10-28 is a timing chart corresponding to both the case where execution of the pending display notice presentation is decided when execution of the winning flash presentation is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the pending display notice presentation. Figs. 10-29 to 10-48 are diagrams showing the presentation modes of the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and execution of the pending display notice presentation and the winning flash presentation are decided based on the start winning. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 are diagrams showing the presentation state of the image display device 5 and winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning, while a decision is made not to execute a pending display advance presentation.

Note that "when it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 10-29 to 10-48 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ (displayed as a blue or red circle), and "when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect but not to execute the pending display preview effect" shown in Figures 10-49 to 10-68 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern α (displayed as a white circle).

First, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-29(A), during variable display, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. During variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27(A) to Fig. 10-27(D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (for example, a preview performance-related sound such as a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserve memories as reserve memories (three reserve displays are displayed in the first reserve memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-29 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-29 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-30 (C) and Fig. 10-30 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-30(D), 10-31(E), and 10-31(F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 starts before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 10-32 (G) and 10-32 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-32 (G) and 10-32 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 10-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

As shown in Figures 10-32 (H), 10-33 (I) and 10-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B superimposed on the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S in this characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when superimposed on the black image 135SG005B.

In this characteristic section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when it is displayed overlapping with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the probability of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-32(H) and FIG. 10-33(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(J), FIG. 10-34(K) and FIG. 10-34(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-34 (K) to 10-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-40 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-41(Y) and FIG. 10-41(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-41(Y) and FIG. 10-41(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-40 (W) and 10-40 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode corresponds to the background image when the variable display is executed again). Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-45(g) to 10-46(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-46 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-45(g) and Fig. 10-46(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

As shown in Figures 10-48(m) and 10-48(n), when the variable display progresses and it becomes time to start the reach performance, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the performance image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach performance starts. Note that in this feature 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach performance of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as a later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

In other words, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off. Then, when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting up at brightness C1) according to the reach effect described above.

During the whiteout period, the speakers 8L and 8R stop outputting the variable display corresponding sound. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in response to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the reach performance corresponding sound, which is the sound in response to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic section 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display preview effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

Next, we will explain the cases where the execution of the pending display preview effect along with the winning flash effect is not decided upon starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-49 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-49 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-49 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-50 (C) and Fig. 10-50 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-49 (B), 10-50 (C), and 10-50 (D), the aforementioned specific display display start performance A is displayed as an appearance animation in which the pending display that is the subject of the currently running winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)). In addition, the pending display that has completed the appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like the other pending displays as a specific display rotating display performance.

In particular, when the special display start performance A is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends while the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned special display start performance B is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E has finished on the image display device 5 (see Figures 10-29 to 10-32). In other words, when the special display start performance A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed and the rotation animation is started earlier than when the special display start performance B is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will blink, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 will start before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect A in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-52 (G) and 10-52 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 10-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-52 (H), 10-53 (I) and 10-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-52(H) and FIG. 10-53(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-53(J), FIG. 10-54(K) and FIG. 10-54(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-54 (K) to 10-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Fig. 10-58 (S) to Fig. 10-60 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 10-60 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-61(Y) and FIG. 10-51(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-61(Y) and FIG. 10-61(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode corresponds to the background image when the variable display is executed again). Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-65(g) to 10-66(j)).

As shown in Fig. 10-65(g) and Fig. 10-66(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-66 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-68(m) and 10-68(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as a later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but once the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach presentation.

During the whiteout period, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) according to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the reach performance corresponding sound, which is the sound according to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash performance. Furthermore, the present invention has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light-emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light-emitting means in the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C3 and a cycle of T4 during the early winning flash performance. During the execution of the winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0. Therefore, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, making the winning flash effect stand out more, and making it even easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect are determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect may be determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, as the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B, an animation of the appearance of the active display of one of the display patterns α to γ (display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is not executed or the display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is executed) is executed in the active display area 135SG005A, and then, as the specific display rotation display effect, a rotation display of the active display is executed, and a winning flash effect (early winning flash effect and late winning flash effect) is executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

As shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the specific display start presentation is composed of a part where an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a part where the pending display is displayed as a rotation animation as shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D). As shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, the rotation animation of the pending display starts from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display is completed, so the player's attention to the pending display can be increased.

Also, as shown in Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), when the specific display start performance B is executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, even when the specific display start performance A of Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D) is executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent.

The execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(A) to FIG. 10-50(D), the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A. Therefore, regardless of whether the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern α to display pattern γ, the winning flash effect can start before the specific display start effect ends, so the player can reliably recognize the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), 10-49(A) and 10-49(B), if it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In this characteristic section 135SG, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be changed to a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if they were emitting light at brightness C2 until then, they may be changed to a brightness C3 that is lower than the brightness C2). In other words, the "low brightness state" in this invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at a low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off (not emitting light).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n) and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-68 (n), during the variable display, a flash effect when a prize is won can be executed whether or not a preview effect is being executed, and as shown in Figure 10-29 (B), when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the variable display is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the variable display corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2), and when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the preview effect is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the preview effect corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2). Therefore, even if the variable display corresponding sound or advance notice corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash corresponding sound can be output so that it is easy for the player to hear, so the output of the winning flash corresponding sound makes it easy for the player to recognize the execution of the winning flash corresponding sound.

In this characteristic section 135SG, as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound are output at volume V2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound may be output at volume V2, while the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound may be output at a volume lower than volume V2 (for example, volume V3).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound does not have to be output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound. Specifically, if the advance notice effect starts during the execution of the winning flash effect (while the winning flash effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be temporarily stopped, and only the variable display corresponding sound and the advance notice effect corresponding sound, or only either the advance notice effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound, may be output. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound being difficult for the player to hear due to the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

As shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink and the animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R allows the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that it has been decided to execute a winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display animation is completed after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display appearance animation may start after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C2 (C1>C2). By making at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flash at brightness C1, the player can be made aware of the start of the winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashing at brightness C1 during the execution of the later winning flash effect can be prevented from interfering with other effects and decreasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C1 and a cycle T2 as a flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 and a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" as a flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance of this characteristic part 135SG includes both a slow flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle) and a low brightness mode with a low degree of emphasis due to low brightness, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance may be only one of the slow flashing mode and the low brightness mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect includes the execution period of the variable display before the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. Therefore, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is the variable display that is the subject, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5. During the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash performance, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby preventing the image display device 5 from continuing to display effect image 135SG005E, which would interfere with other displays and reduce interest in the game.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in Figures 10-30(D) to 10-31(F) and 10-34(L), the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in a brighter color than the silhouette image 135SG005S, and the display area on the image display device 5 is also larger, so that the display of the effect image 135SG005E can effectively allow the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the winning flash effect has started, and by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2 during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the interference with other effects by the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, while the later winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the winning flash effect corresponding sound interfering with other effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the winning flash effect corresponding sound interfering with other effects by not outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound while the later winning flash effect is being executed.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash during the variable display pattern determination period before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect begins. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the pattern determination period regardless of whether or not a pattern determination command has been received (the determination command reception flag has been set) or whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out. This makes it possible to accurately maintain the player's anticipation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state until the start of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the early winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C1 and cycle T1) corresponding to the early winning flash performance, and after the early winning flash performance ends, as the late winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance. Although an example has been given of the body lamp 9d being illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and cycle T0), the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the early winning flash performance when the early winning flash performance ends, thereby preventing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d from illuminating in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash performance during the execution of the late winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small symbol 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped. Therefore, even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a combination that indicates a loss, allowing the player to recognize that the symbol determination period is in progress.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-33 (J), while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the silhouette image 135SG005S from being overlapped with the small pattern 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

In addition, this feature section 135SG can execute a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbols and a re-variable display on the image display device 5 during variable display, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed as a winning flash performance superimposed on the special symbol (see Figure 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbols temporarily stop, so that the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, providing the player with an element of surprise and increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even for the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, and increasing the interest of the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start of the reach effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the effect control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the effect due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, so that the sense of incongruity that would be felt if the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect did not end at the start timing of the reach effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the performance control CPU 120 will end the later winning flash performance based on the reception of a pattern determination command, thereby further reducing the sense of discomfort felt when ending the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, if a start winning occurs at the first start port while the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 10-17, in this feature section 135SG, the reserved display and active display can be displayed in one of display patterns α to γ, which have different jackpot expectation rates, and as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to display the reserved display and active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will emit light in a color corresponding to display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Therefore, the player can recognize the display mode of the reserved display and active display from the light emission mode (light emission color) of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, which increases the fun of the game.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the flash effect at the time of the later winning in the characteristic portion 135SG is exemplified as being executed regardless of whether or not it is during the pattern determination period (when the variable display is stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 10-69 to 10-89 as modified example 135SG-1, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. as the flash effect at the time of the later winning may not be executed during the pattern determination period.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-69 and 10-70 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-69, Fig. 10-71 (C) and Fig. 10-71 (D), the image display device 5 starts to display the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X and button lamp 135SG009Y start to blink at cycle T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-71 (D), 10-72 (E), and 10-72 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the present modified example 135SG-1) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and the effect image 135SG005E starts on the image display device 5 before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As shown in Figures 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-74 (I) and 10-74 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in Figures 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on receipt of a pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in Figures 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the pattern determination period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect and the display of silhouette image 135SG005S on image display device 5 are stopped, and only the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5 continues.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-75 (K) to 10-82 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following are repeatedly executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5; however, during the pattern determination period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-79 (S) to Fig. 10-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 10-81 (W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), a later winning flash performance is executed by outputting a winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

In FIG. 10-81(W), while the winning flash effect is being executed, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not blinked at brightness C2 and cycle T2, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to blink at brightness C2 and cycle T2 even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, for the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is executed continuously during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-82(Y) and FIG. 10-82(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-82(Y) and FIG. 10-82(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is being executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-86(g) to 10-87(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-87 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-89(m) and 10-89(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this modified example 135SG-1, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end. On the other hand, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 continue.

As shown in FIG. 10-69, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display preview effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the initial winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is being performed due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being continuously turned on as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display has ended even though it is during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, as long as it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a variable display is being executed, it is also possible to execute only one or two of the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., as the later winning flash performance are not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a form in which the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., as the later winning flash performance are not executed during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the later winning flash performance based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the later winning flash performance, so that the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, as the later winning flash performance, are not executed during the pattern determination period.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, selects the later winning flash performance process table again and resets and starts the later winning flash performance process timer, thereby starting the later winning flash performance (output of winning flash performance corresponding sound, illumination of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

As an example of a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not illuminated as a late winning flash effect during the pattern determination period during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the effect control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the late winning flash effect is being executed, continue to output to the lamp control board 14 lighting control data that keeps the winning flash lamp 135SG009F off (for example, the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is "0:0:0" indicating off), rather than lighting control data according to the process data of the late winning flash effect process timer, until it receives a variable display start command.

In addition, if the later winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be executed again from the beginning of each cycle from the start of the new variable display (see Figure 10-69), or the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle from the start of the new variable display.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the variable display ends while the later winning flash performance is being executed, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R as the later winning flash performance and the display of silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped during the pattern determination period of the variable display, while the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d continues in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may also be stopped during the pattern determination period. In particular, the flashing of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be stopped during the pattern determination period by turning off the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the pattern determination period, or the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be kept continuously lit in a constant color (for example, a color corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period.

In addition, in the description of FIG. 10-8, in the feature section 135SG, it has been described that multiple reach effects may be provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach. However, when multiple reach effects are provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach in this manner, the likelihood of a jackpot may be made different between the reach effects of the multiple Super Reach (for example, as the reach effect of the Super Reach, a reach effect of Super Reach α and a reach effect of Super Reach β, which has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the reach effect of Super Reach α, may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute multiple Super Reach reach effects with different jackpot expectations, as shown in Figures 10-90(A) and 10-90(B) as modified example 135SG-2, the movable body 32 is made movable between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a variable pattern of Super Reach α (a variable display that executes the reach effect of Super Reach α), the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 during the variable display, excluding the active display area 135SG005A, is temporarily whited out. During this period, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between evacuation positions (for example, an intermediate position between the aforementioned evacuation position and the performance position) to execute a movable body operation suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 should move to the performance position, and if the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance is a variable display in the variable pattern of Super Reach β (a variable display that executes the reach performance of Super Reach β), the aforementioned movable body operation suggestion performance may be executed during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out, and then a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from the evacuation position to the performance position may be executed.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed), the player can be notified that the movable body movement performance will execute the reach performance of Super Reach β, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance of Super Reach α, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

For example, if the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach α variable pattern, as shown in Figures 10-91(A) and 10-91(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-93(E) to 10-94(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-94 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-95(I) to 10-96(L), when the variable display progresses and the timing for the reach effect to start arrives, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(A) and FIG. 10-96(K) to FIG. 10-97(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends based on the movable body 32 repeatedly moving back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four times in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown, and the whiteout period also ends. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position may be output.

As shown in Figures 10-90 (A), 10-98 (O) and 10-98 (P), from the timing when the movable body operation suggestion effect and whiteout end, the reach effect of Super Reach α starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α (such as background music different from the variable display corresponding sound).

When the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variable pattern, as shown in Figures 10-99(A) and 10-99(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of a variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-101(E) to 10-102(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-102 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-103(I) to 10-104(L), when the variable display progresses and the timing for the reach effect to start arrives, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes temporarily white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F goes to white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(B) and FIG. 10-104(K) to FIG. 10-105(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends when the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output a movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position may be output.

After the movable body operation suggestion performance ends, as shown in Figure 10-90 (B) and Figure 10-106 (O) to Figure 10-106 (P), the whiteout period ends and the movable body 32 moves from the retreat position to the performance position by a drive mechanism not shown as a movable body operation performance. During the movable body operation performance period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body operation performance. Also, although not shown in Figure 10-90 (B), a movable body operation performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (see Figure 10-106 (P)). As the movable body operation performance corresponding sound in this feature part 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "bang") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has operated may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body operation presentation ends based on the return of the movable body 32 from the presentation position to the retreat position. As shown in FIG. 10-90(B), FIG. 10-107(Q) and FIG. 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body operation presentation and the whiteout are finished, the reach presentation of the Super Reach β starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach presentation, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β. Note that, as the reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound or the reach presentation corresponding sound corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach α may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach presentation of the Super Reach β is being executed.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach, which is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the Super Reach reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect (lights up at brightness C2) instead of flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2, which increases the interest in playing the reach effect.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) and Figures 10-104 (K) to 10-106 (O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout), and during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then from the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variation pattern, the movable body action suggestion effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, and then, in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the performance position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body action effect. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 with a period of turning off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in these light emission modes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview effect can be executed as a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-3, the preview effect may be, in addition to a dialogue preview effect, a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, with the expected probability of a jackpot varying depending on the final number of stages of change, or a group preview effect in which a group of multiple characters crosses the image display device 5, etc.

In particular, in the case where the step-up effect can be executed as modified example 135SG-3, as shown in Figures 10-108 (A) and 10-109 (A) to 10-113 (L), when the step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which the winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be temporarily lit at brightness C2 at the timing when an image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is gradually changed, thereby enhancing the effect of the step-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) and FIG. 10-114(A) to FIG. 10-118(F), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on when the image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is changed in stages. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, may not be emitting light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is started in the variable display while the winning flash effect is being executed, that is, when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 as the winning flash effect and a step-up effect is started to light up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority, so it is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting to light up in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect at an inappropriate timing, such as the end timing of the winning flash effect.

In addition, the characteristic portion 135SG has been exemplified as an embodiment in which the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from a retracted position (e.g., a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5) before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, thereby notifying the player that the reach performance of the Super Reach will be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a movable body movement effect before the reach effect of the Super Reach, as shown in Figures 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, when a winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to either the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, it is decided with a probability of 70% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect from the start timing of the movable body operation effect, and it is decided with a probability of 30% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is a miss, at the start of the variable display, it is decided that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation performance, and that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance at a rate of 70% from the start timing of the reach performance.

When it is decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation, the process data corresponding to the decision is selected, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer as the variable display progresses.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing when the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach, so the player can easily recognize whether the winning flash effect ends during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the expectation of a big win differs when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the moving body movement effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changing to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends. This also makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the winning flash effect ends, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed either at the start of the movable body movement presentation during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash presentation, or at the start of the reach presentation of the super reach. Since the expectation of a big win differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement presentation from the start timing of the moving body movement presentation, and the case where the light emission mode is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation, the player can be drawn to the presentation that is being executed at the time when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, in the variable display of the super reach, a form in which the movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body operation suggestion presentation that suggests the execution of the movable body operation presentation may be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation. In this way, when the movable body operation suggestion presentation can be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation, a case is provided in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation, and the expectation of a jackpot may be different between the case in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation and ... is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effects being performed when the lighting state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation, or whether the light emission mode is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a form in which the light emission (flashing) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation and a form in which it ends at the start timing of the reach presentation, so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on when the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends. Furthermore, even if multiple timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect during one variable display, if the effect control CPU 120 is unable to stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended again at the end of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is a timing that comes after these timings.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect cannot be ended at the start of the movable body operation suggestion effect or the start of the reach effect, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended at the end of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, the display patterns for the specific display (pending display and active display) are display pattern α, which has the lowest jackpot expectation and is a white circle, display pattern β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern α and is a blue circle, and display pattern γ, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern β and is a red circle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and display patterns other than display pattern α to display pattern γ may be provided as the display patterns for the specific display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to γ, the display patterns of a specific display may include a display pattern δ that is a white flashing circle that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low), and a display pattern ε that is a specific character-shaped circle that is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high).

In other words, for the display patterns of the pending display and active display in variant 135SG-5, among display patterns α to γ, display pattern γ (red display) is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and display pattern α (white display) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, for the jackpot expectation of display patterns δ and ε when there is no change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of display pattern α, or may be set higher than that of display pattern α and lower than that of display pattern β.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, display pattern δ and display pattern ε are provided as hold display and active display patterns that may change to display pattern β and display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may also be cases where display pattern α changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ and display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may also be cases where the hold display and active display of display pattern β changes to display pattern γ.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example was given of a form in which the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance (a performance in which the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined independently of the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern may be determined in relation to the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 for the aforementioned modified example 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the start winning may be decided as follows: display pattern ε at the highest rate, display pattern δ at a lower rate than display pattern ε, display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ, display pattern β at a lower rate than display pattern γ, and display pattern α at the lowest rate (display pattern decision rate when deciding to execute a winning flash effect: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as the display modes for the special displays (pending display and active display), and when the special display is displayed as display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability that the winning flash effect will also be executed is higher than when the special display is displayed as display pattern β or display pattern γ. Therefore, by executing the winning flash effect, the player can be drawn to the special display, and the player can also be drawn to whether the special display will change from display pattern δ or display pattern ε to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white circle, display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a blue circle, display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a red circle, and display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white blinking circle, so that the player can easily identify the difference between the specific displays by the display color and blinking pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, there is no description of the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a flash effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ that flashes white is exemplified as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special mode of the specific display in the present invention (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal and special modes of the specific display in the present invention (for example, purple, black, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a form is exemplified in which a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ, thereby suggesting that the specific display will change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute an action presentation that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display.

In particular, when an action effect is used, a plurality of action effects with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ may be provided as the action effect (for example, a first action effect that can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and a second action effect that has a different performance ratio from the first action effect and can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher ratio than the first action effect) and when the second action effect is executed, a winning flash effect may be executed at a higher ratio than when the first action effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action performance will be executed as the first action performance or the second action performance, and by executing the flash performance when a prize is won, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation that the action performance will be executed as the second action performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε, the probability that the flash effect will be executed when a prize is won is higher than when the special display is displayed in display pattern δ. Therefore, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε and the flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the player's attention can be drawn to the change in the display pattern of the special display to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε that displays a character is provided as the display pattern of the specific display (pending display and active display), and an example is given in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ by executing an action performance on the character as the specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 135SG-6, a character as the specific display can act on another character, and as a result of this action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of first special reserved memories is three and is being variably displayed, a winning entry into the first start port (start winning entry) occurs, and based on the start winning, the display pattern of the reserved display based on the start winning is determined to be display pattern ε as a reserved display preview performance, and an ally character is displayed as the fourth reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see Figure 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display begins; that is, as shown in Figures 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), when the ally character (pending display of display pattern ε) displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the fourth pending display to the display position of the third pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Next, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in Figures 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third pending display to the display position of the second pending display, and when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the second pending display to the display position of the first pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the subject of the pending display preview performance begins, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

As shown in Figures 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), if an ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character changes to an active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ in the active display area 135SG005A. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), if an ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character changes to an active display of display pattern α in the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-6, when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, an ally character as the reserved display of the display pattern ε can defeat an enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby changing the active display of the ally character to the active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, the ally character as the reserved display can be changed to the reserved display of display pattern β or display pattern γ by defeating an enemy character when the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

In addition, when the pending display is displayed in display pattern ε, the pending display of display pattern ε may be changed to the pending display (or active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate when both winning flash effects are executed than when neither winning flash effect is executed. In this way, not only can the player be drawn to the outcome of the battle between the ally character and enemy character as the pending display of display pattern ε, but the player can also be drawn to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed during the battle, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, display patterns for the pending display and active display are exemplified by adding display pattern δ and display pattern ε to display pattern α to display pattern γ described in characteristic part 135SG, but when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern δ or display pattern ε, specific display display start performance A or specific display display start performance B can be executed in the same manner as when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern α to display pattern γ.

More specifically, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ, the specific display display start performance A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of display pattern α, and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern ε, the specific display display start performance B (see FIG. 10-20) is executed as in the case of display pattern β or display pattern γ, or a specific display display start performance in which the period during which the display of the reserved display or active display is completed is longer than that of specific display display start performance A and shorter than that of specific display display start performance B is executed. In this way, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the player will be able to recognize the winning flash performance sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a timing before the display of the reserved display or active display is completed, as in the characteristic part 135SG.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a form was exemplified in which the winning flash effect is achieved by displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages in accordance with the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in Figures 10-124(A) and 10-124(B), if a win (start win) occurs in the first start port during variable display when there are three first special chart reserved memories, and a decision is made based on the start win to execute the reserved display notice performance and the winning flash performance, the previous winning flash performance will start as shown in Figure 10-124(B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in FIG. 10-124(B), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R starts at a volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-125(C) and FIG. 10-125(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from the periphery of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y with a period T1 starts. In addition, in this blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-125(D), 10-126(E), and 10-126(F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As shown in Fig. 10-127 (G) and Fig. 10-127 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-128 (I) and 10-128 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-128(J), FIG. 10-129(K) and FIG. 10-129(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

Incidentally, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-129(K) and FIG. 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 may be displayed larger than in the previous variable display. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than in the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-130(M) and FIG. 10-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. The flash effect at the time of the later winning is executed even during the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B overlapping on the image display device 5 even during the pattern determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlapping with the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

In this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the winning flash effect can be one of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes, and when the larger silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed overlapping each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed overlapping each other only when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed. In this way, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, i.e., the active display corresponding to the winning flash effect, so that a sense of surprise is given to the player and interest in the game is increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and the overlapping manner between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may or may not overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, a case where only a part of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the reserved display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. In this way, the player can easily recognize the reserved display and active display that correspond to the winning flash performance, and since not only the reserved display but also the active display are hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, the player can be given an even greater sense of surprise and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won is used to hide either the pending display or the active display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A or the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the special pattern (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. By doing so, the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as an example of a reversible display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reversible display effect, an image different from the special pattern can be displayed on the image display device 5, and a silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won can be displayed overlapping with that image.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the execution of the winning flash performance based on the start winning is not decided (determined not to be executed), but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-8, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display may be specified, and if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided (determined not to be executed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display (hold display or active display) of the target of the winning flash performance from becoming difficult to understand by executing the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-8, an example is given of a form in which the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect may also be based on the remaining period of the variable display and a period other than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.).

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is identified, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the execution of the winning flash effect is not decided; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the winning flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect due to the overlapping execution of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance are two light emission modes: blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the early winning flash performance) and blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (light emission mode in the late winning flash performance). On the other hand, the light emission modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emission performance are blue light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. In other words, the characteristic part 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance may be different from the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance.

In particular, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, by providing display pattern δ and display pattern ε as display patterns for the pending display and active display, and providing light emission modes corresponding to display pattern δ and display pattern ε as the light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance, the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance may be made greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance. In this way, the variation in the light emission of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is increased, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-10, the illumination area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the illumination area where the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the start of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the end of the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). Therefore, by applying the modified example 135SG-10, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emitting light in response to the winning flash effect for an excessively long period of time, while maintaining the player's anticipation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is lit without blinking as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect. Furthermore, when the start gate lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be made different from the blinking cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S different in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-11, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5 may be temporarily lowered to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when a prize is won may be started. In this way, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced, making it easier for the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the brightness of the image display device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to a low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to reducing the brightness (brightness) of the image display device 5, other forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may include temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, operating the movable body 32 in front of the image display device 5, repeatedly operating the image display device 5 itself in the up and down direction, increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 to relatively reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, etc.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the image display device 5 is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and includes a state in which the visibility of the image is reduced by a method other than a reduction in the brightness of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. In this way, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred and that the winning flash effect has been decided to be executed by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, a form has been exemplified in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have the winning flash effect corresponding sound be output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display start.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. During the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. The above example shows a form in which the display of the win-time flash effect is repeatedly executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the following may be temporarily executed: output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, flashing of winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and display of effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5, just as during the execution period of the earlier winning flash effect. By doing this, even during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, just like in the earlier winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is about to begin, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution of the later winning flash performance, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E temporarily, just as during the execution of the earlier winning flash performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts during the execution of the later winning flash performance, only one or two of the following may be executed: the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this specification is one in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value (Figs. 1 to 9), one in which a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect can be executed based on the initial winning, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect varies depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figs. 10-1 to 10-68), one in which the winning flash effect is stopped during the period in which the variable display pattern is determined (variant 135SG-1, Figs. 10-69 to 10-89), one in which the reach effect of super reaches with different jackpot expectations can be executed and a movable body operation effect can be executed before a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation, and when the movable body operation effect is executed, the start of the movable body operation effect A variation 2 in which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the timing (Fig. 10-90 to Fig. 10-107), a step-up presentation can be executed during variable display, and when the step-up presentation is executed when the winning flash presentation is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up presentation, while when the step-up presentation is executed during the execution of the winning flash presentation, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation (variation 135SG-3, Fig. 10-108 to Fig. 10-118). , a movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach, and the expected probability of a big win differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation and the case where the light emission mode changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation (variant example 135SG-4, FIG. 10-119), display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for the reserved display and active display, and in response to the execution of the winning time flash presentation being determined by the start winning, any of the display patterns is selected as the display pattern for the reserved display and active display. The present invention discloses a pachinko machine that has a different ratio of when the reserved display pattern is determined (Modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10-120), when display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the reserved display, the display pattern ε changes to one of display patterns α to γ depending on the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG-6, FIG. 10-121 to FIG. 10-123), and the display mode of silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on image display device 5 changes depending on the progress of the winning flash effect (Modification 135SG-7, FIG. 10-124 to FIG. 10-130). However, the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these multiple characteristic parts and variations.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, has light-emitting means that can emit light (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a display area that can display images, and can display game-related information regarding the progress of the game (e.g., the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns, small patterns that have a smaller display area than the decorative patterns) in the display area (e.g., first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J), and has a specific display (e.g., a display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific image (e.g., a pending display and an active display), a storage means (e.g., CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and an image processing means (e.g., display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers, and and a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 14-17 ) that can execute a specific display performance (e.g., a portion that displays a pending display or an active display in any one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the occurrence of a start winning, and a specific light emitting performance (e.g., a flash performance when a winning is won) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and that can execute a performance that displays the specific image in the display area, and the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the feature portion 006SG) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., a portion that displays a pending display or an active display in any one of display patterns α to γ in the case of the feature portion 006SG). The image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the image processing means applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate a left region 006SG005L and a right region 006SG005L as display images to be displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). a part that creates an image in which the image of R moves upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward) and the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, a part that turns on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), and Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D)), and is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature part 006SG) in which the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during the variable display. the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which an arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in a layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when a flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when a flash effect at the time of winning is not executed), and the light-emitting means is a first light-emitting means (for example, , winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during a first period from the start of the specific light emitting performance to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early winning flash performance to the end timing of the early winning flash performance) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance (e.g., a period from the start of the late winning flash performance to the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance). As shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution of the early winning flash performance, and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution of the late winning flash performance), the second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution of the early winning flash performance, and flash at brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution of the late winning flash performance).

According to this configuration, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance, and since the specific light emitting performance can be made more prominent by emitting light not only from the first light emitting means but also from the second light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during the first period of the specific light emitting performance, the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance becomes even easier for the player to recognize. In addition, since a displaced specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the specified performance is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during the execution of the specific performance, which would reduce the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect due to the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means, and it is possible to execute the specific effect with a small amount of data, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information when the specific effect is executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an arcade, allows the effect to be easily understood by players, and can execute the specific effect with a small amount of data without decreasing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine form that makes it easier for a player to recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect, and that can execute a specific effect with a small amount of data while preventing a decrease in visibility of the display image of game-related information, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can execute variable display, has a display area in which images can be displayed, and in which display means (e.g., an image display device 5) can display display images (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information relating to the progress of a game (e.g., the number of reserved first special figures, the number of reserved second special figures, and a small pattern that is smaller in the display area than the decorative pattern), and a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display means (e.g., a display device 5) that displays the game-related information. The display device includes a storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a display image of a notification, ... The image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data from a first position (for example, in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and an image for displacement is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement target image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). The display image displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moves upward, and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward. The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority). Below, an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 11 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 11 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 11 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling due to the setting value. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG, a reach suggestion effect in the modified example 006SG-1, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a foresight notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific performance can be executed by displacing the display position of a specific image from a first position to a second position simply by using image data for displaying a specific image in the display area and display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Therefore, the amount of data to be stored in the memory means for executing a specific performance can be reduced compared to when a specific performance is executed using dedicated image data.

The gaming machine of aspect A2 is the gaming machine according to aspect A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific effect is being executed, the display position of the game-related information does not shift along with at least a portion of the specific image, thereby preventing the game-related information from becoming difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect A3 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced but is displayed overlapping the displaced specific image, so that the player can recognize the game-related information without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of aspect A4 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area of the display area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even when the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displaced specific image, so that the player can accurately recognize the game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
The game device includes a game identifier variable display execution means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identifiers (for example, special symbols),
The performance execution means includes:
In a first region within the display region, a variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the game identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a central portion of the display region of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of a special pattern can be executed);
In a second area in the display area that is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, a variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the gaming identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol can be executed);
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visibility state changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state which is more difficult for the player to see than the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion performance is executed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility).
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-21 and 14-23, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, when the development suggestion performance is executed, the small symbols do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility is not reduced).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of a specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the effect identification information from a first visual state to a second visual state when a specific effect is executed, and since the visual state of the reduced identification information does not change from the first visual state when a specific effect is executed, a player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually checking the reduced identification information even while a specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B shown in FIG. 14-31),
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
When the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced, an effect image (for example, a cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 14-31) different from the images displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a special effect can be more effectively recognized by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A7 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6,
The performance execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction and displacing the second specific display area in a second direction opposite to the first direction, as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T to the right and the lower area 006SG005B to the left, and as shown in FIG. 14-31(E), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T upward and the lower area 006SG005B downward).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific performance can be executed as a displacement of the first specific display area in a first direction and a displacement of the second specific display area in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction, thereby further improving the effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6 or A7,
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific performance are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further improve the presentation effect of specific presentations.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than a decorative pattern or background image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image is displaced as a specific performance, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, by contrasting the specific image with the effect image, the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more prominent, thereby further improving the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors, blue and red, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion capable of displaying the cutting effect image 006SG005S in three colors, blue, green, and red);
The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the special presentation, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes gradually (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, a part in which the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases gradually; as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, a part in which the decorative pattern in the middle gradually expands and the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases; as shown in FIG. 14-35, in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5, a part in which the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific image changes in stages, thereby improving the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern in the middle gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, as well as the portion in which the decorative pattern and the background image gradually distort toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of a specific image from a first position to a second position in a specific presentation can be emphasized, thereby further increasing the interest of the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, a portion in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific performance is a performance in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases stepwise (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-2, a part in which the number of pieces constituting the decorative pattern in the middle increases stepwise as the revival performance progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of the image pieces gradually increasing can leave a strong impression on the player of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the part in which the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 increases stepwise in the revival effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the total display area increases stepwise, so that the player's attention can be more effectively drawn to the specific effects.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of pieces of image data for displacement are stored in the CGROM 206);
The proportion of the specific image controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced based on (for example, in a variable display in a super reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the third stage is used, whereas in a variable display in a normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage is used, so that the proportion of the specific image controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the specific image changes during the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first state to a second state different from the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage), and second display position change information in which the specific image does not change from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a normal reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage or the second stage).
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change part for changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect by the image processing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the third stage is used, and in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the first stage is used, the difference between ... The portions where the images in the left region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common between the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used and the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is used,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as a specific effect, thereby further increasing the interest in the specific effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
After the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), after the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation and increasing interest in the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A18 is the gaming machine according to aspect A17,
The boundary between the first specific display region and the second specific display region is displaceable in a direction different from that of at least one of the multiple display regions including the first specific display region and the second specific display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific presentation can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the multiple display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, images can be arranged across an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-39, when performing a promotion performance, a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a displaced specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, the risk of an inappropriate display being performed in the display area can be reduced.
In addition, in variant example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when executing a promotion performance (specific performance), an example is given of form A in which an image for the promotion performance is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, in other words, it is not necessary to displace the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of aspect A20 is the gaming machine of aspect A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, a part that gradually enlarges a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area according to the progress of the promotion effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area during the process leading up to the display of the displaced specific image, while maintaining the effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displaced specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are the same (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left are in common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A23 is the gaming machine according to aspect A21 or A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is not displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the displaced specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-3, a part of the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is not displayed as an image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further increase the interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a portion in which a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′ is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image));
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(B), a portion in which a variable display preview effect can be displayed in a stereoscopic image),
When the specific performance is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(D), when a development suggestion performance is executed, an image displayed as the development suggestion performance is displayed as a planar image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stereoscopic presentation can increase the player's interest, and since a displaced specific image is not displayed as a stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be implemented in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A25 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24,
the right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, a stereoscopic performance can be executed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect A26 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24 or A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introduction performance of the specific performance during a period prior to the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution of the stereoscopic effect allows the player to be aware in advance that a specific effect will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the specific effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, RAM 122, display control unit 123, etc. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives performance control commands via the input circuit 260. Based on the performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 also performs processing to cause the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 constitutes a display control circuit together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as characters (image data of people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) and decorative patterns, background images, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns for displaying a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the number of reserved first special patterns as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG, and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the number of reserved second special patterns, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area are stored.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read out the necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 is a ROM for storing in advance the character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. Note that the CGROM 205 in this characteristic unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the data to the displacement target image described later. The display control unit 123 reads out the image data from the CGROM 205 according to the command of the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is an integrated circuit equipped with a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, an attribute register 203 in which attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, data specifying the character drawing order, number of colors, zoom ratio, palette number, coordinates, etc.) are stored, a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area of the VRAM area described later, a data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer of CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area, a display control unit 213 that outputs video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area of the VRAM area described later, and a DA converter 214 that converts the video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs it to the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 includes a system bus and a CG bus, which are connected to the performance control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and to an image processing DSP 264 to which an infrared camera 60 is connected. The CG bus is further connected to a CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

The drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are also connected to the system bus, and are able to access the system register 202. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are also connected to the CG bus, and are able to access the CG ROM 205 and attribute register 203.

A VRAM bus is also provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system registers 202 include a system control register that stores commands for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores commands for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing register that stores the drawing area in the VRAM area and the area where palette data is placed, a data transfer register that stores the source address and destination address when transferring data, and a display register that stores the display image creation area in the VRAM area.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V-blank interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 120 at the start of each V-blank (image update period), and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic part 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and in the next V blank, it is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in Figures 14-2(a) and 14-2(b), this characteristic section 006SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area (see Figure 14-5). Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), the VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image (described later) is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5.

In other words, Layer 1 is the top layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the bottom layer with the lowest image display priority.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (b) and 14-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the first reserved memory number of special patterns and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the second reserved memory number of special patterns at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image 006SG005J that includes a small pattern that is smaller in display area than the decorative pattern at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5 because they have the highest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5 because it has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is displayed as the lowest image in the image display device 5 because it has the lowest display priority.

In this characteristic section 006SG, the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area are set to a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

Next, we will explain the method of displacing the image to be displaced in this characteristic part 006SG. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the image for displacement to be applied to the image to be displaced has multiple pixels having red component values (R values) and green component values (G values) arranged therein. These R values and G values each have a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking pixel A as an example, the display control unit 123 identifies the position of pixel X to be displaced from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image based on the R and G values of pixel A. Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward) of the X axis as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the positive direction (rightward) of the X axis as the coordinate of pixel X in the X axis direction. The amount of movement in the X axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

If the G value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate of pixel X, and if the G value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate (position) of pixel X. Note that the amount of movement in the Y axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the difference from 128, which is the median G value.

Then, once the position of pixel X in the displacement target image has been identified, pixel X is designated as the pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature part 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and by adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A to the same value, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X that is the same distance away from the position corresponding to pixel A to a position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for multiple pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the displacement image is composed of multiple regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image d) with different R and G values, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in Fig. 14-4(A) to Fig. 14-4(C), the following regions are provided that make up the displacement image: displacement image a with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127; displacement image b with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256; displacement image c with an R value of any one of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128; and displacement image d with an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128. The image of the triple circle is the image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 14-4(D), for displacement image a, the range in the displacement target image that is moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image a is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(E), for displacement image b, the range in the displacement target image that is moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image b is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(F), for displacement image c, the range in the displacement target image that is moved left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image c is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(G), for displacement image d, the range in the displacement target image that is moved right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image d is specified as the display range in the displacement image.

As described above, by displacing the specified range from the image to be displaced to the positions of displacement images a, b, c, and d using the R and G values of displacement images a, b, c, and d, a displacement image such as that shown in Figure 14-4 (H) is generated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, the boundaries between displacement images a, b, c, and d are clearly defined by setting either the R value or the G value of each of displacement images a, b, c, and d to a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of the pixels near each boundary between displacement images a, b, c, and d.

Figure 14-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 006SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-6 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-8 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 006SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 006SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 006SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 006SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 14-9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 006SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 006SG will be explained using FIG. 14-9 (B). In this feature section 006SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 006SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-10 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, in this feature section 006SG, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 006SG include Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2), and Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 14-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β change pattern is set to be longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α change pattern. In other words, the Super Reach β change pattern is set to have a higher chance of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" than the Super Reach α change pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are also variation patterns that execute a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect after a reach is established during the variable display. In the normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed after the development suggestion effect is executed without developing into a super reach reach effect, while in the super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the super reach reach effect is executed after the development suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are exemplified as examples of a form in which a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect is executed after a reach is established during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and between the normal reach fluctuation patterns and the super reach fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation pattern in which a development suggestion effect is not executed may be set.In addition, when a development suggestion effect is executed, the rate of development to a super reach reach effect may be set higher than when a development suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 006SG. In this feature part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot can be created, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern's variable display has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%; PA2-1 at a rate of 40%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%; PA2-1 at a rate of 30%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of big win, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reserved data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 14-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area. The performance control data storage area shown in Figure 14-15 (A) has a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer is stored in a specified area of the performance control buffer setting section. The start winning time receiving command buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Figure 14-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 14-12, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 14-8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 14-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (step 006SGS164).

If the judgment in step 006SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 006SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 006SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 006SGS174), and proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 006SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 006SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 006SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 14-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the game is in a high base state, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the program proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the program clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 006SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figures 14-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 14-16 are part of the flowchart of the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the performance control process, after executing the above-mentioned advance notice setting process (step S161), the performance control CPU 120 executes a background image change process (step 006SG162) to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S175.

As a background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%) at the start of the variable display (the timing at which the performance control process process is executed with the performance control process flag value set to 1), and starts displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in response to this decision. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any of a number of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variable displayed and a performance corresponding to the variable display is executed.

In addition, in the background image change process, when the game state changes (for example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the special state or the time-saving state, or from the special state or the time-saving state to the jackpot state or the normal state), the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the new game state on the image display device 5.

Figure 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display during performance processing of the performance control process. In the variable display during performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements by 1 the values of the process timer corresponding to the process table selected by the performance control CPU 120 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing, the variable display time timer set by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting processing, and the variable display control timer (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to create image data for the next display screen for the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the decorative patterns) (step 006SGS922). The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), it is further determined whether the display image processing flag described below is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926. If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the process checks the contents of the process data being executed to determine whether it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926.

In step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process to process (displace) a portion of the image to be displayed on the image display device 5, and then proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 in the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of the decorative pattern is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image in which an image such as the set background image is superimposed on an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the changing decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 006SG is a part of the background image, a first interface image 006SG005I, a second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern, the positions of which have been adjusted in advance so as to be displayed in the display area. In particular, the background image in this characteristic part 006SG is drawn as an image longer in the left-right and up-down directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays the center part of the background image in the left-right direction. In other words, in this characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are areas for drawing and arranging an image that is longer in the up-down and left-right dimensions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only the part of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an example is shown in which the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area may be areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, while the display image creation area may be an image for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, the background image can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by arranging only the parts of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area that correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 in the display image creation area.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control shifts to one that stops the fluctuation. Therefore, even if a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern ends).

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display performance processing shown in Figure 14-17. In the display image processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on or not (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it determines whether the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942; Y), it selects the displacement image data for successful development to the Super Reach performance (for announcing the execution of the Super Reach performance) and proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The displacement image data in this characteristic part 006SG is data in which displacement images to be applied to the displacement target image (in the case of this characteristic part 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (an image arranged in the displacement image creation area)) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, if the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance or the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance as the displacement image data for failed development of a super reach performance (for notifying of non-execution of a super reach performance) (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%.

Note that, in this feature section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which two displacement image data can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance: displacement image data A for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance and displacement image data B for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS946). If the selection of the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, it selects the first displacement image from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949) and proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Also, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the performance control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the performance control CPU 120 executes a displacement image drawing process. In this displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 creates a displacement target image by, for example, synthesizing (superimposing) an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area, and executes a process of creating a displacement image by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image can be determined, for example, by whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off and the display image processing process is terminated (step 006SGS953); if the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative symbols in this characteristic section 006SG will be described with reference to Figs. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in Figs. 14-20(A) and 14-20(B), in this characteristic section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 14-20(A), when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a normal state decorative symbol combining a character image and a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 14-20(B), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decorative symbol consisting of only a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol.

In the variable display with the Super Reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. In the development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing a development notification pattern (the pattern labeled "Development!" shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E)) to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5, indicating that the development will progress to a Super Reach reach performance.

The development notification pattern in this feature part 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is being executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the second stage shown in Figure 14-21 (D), and the third stage shown in Figure 14-21 (E).

Then, when the third stage of sliding of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the development notification symbol moves to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C), and the development of the Super Reach into a Reach performance is announced.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As a development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-22 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-22(C) to 14-22(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing the development notification pattern, which notifies the player that the game will develop into a Super Reach reach performance, to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-22 (C) and the second stage shown in Figure 14-22 (D).

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has been executed, or after the second stage of sliding movement has been executed, as shown in FIG. 14-22(E), the development suggestion performance ends without the third stage of sliding movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 14-22(B), and the decorative patterns and small patterns stop in a combination indicating a miss.

As shown in Fig. 14-21(C) to Fig. 14-21(E), in this characteristic portion 006SG, the sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R increases as the stages progress, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may decrease as the stages progress, or the movement amount may increase or decrease only in one of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid up to three levels as a development suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of levels by which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid as a development suggestion effect may be two levels or less or four levels or more.

As shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this characteristic part 006SG, the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is exemplified as being opposite to that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R may be the same as that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, an example has been given of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for development suggestion effects when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for development suggestion effects when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state).

As shown in Fig. 14-23(A) to Fig. 14-23(E), the development suggestion performance in this characteristic part 006SG is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a background image is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in both the case of variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and are therefore asymmetrical in displacement. For this reason, while the decorative symbols move upward or downward as a development suggestion performance toward the top or bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, reducing visibility to the player, the first interface image 006SG005I remains displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second interface image 006SG005J remains displayed at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J does not decrease.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern is set to a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature part 006SG, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion presentation of this feature part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains a left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains a middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains a right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right decorative patterns, including the characters and numbers, slide along without being separated, preventing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns from being separated, which reduces the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Note that, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic section 006SG, specific effects that displace the display positions of the decorative symbols and background images (development suggestion effects in characteristic section 006SG, reach suggestion effects in variant 006SG-1, revival effects in variant 006SG-2, foresight notice effects in variant 006SG-3, promotion effects in variant 006SG-5, and temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in variant 006SG-6) can be executed simply by using image data for displaying the decorative symbols and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative symbols and background images, so the amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to when these specific effects are executed using dedicated data.

In particular, since this feature section 006SG is capable of displaying multiple images as background images on the image display device 5, it would normally be necessary to store in advance in CGROM 205 a presentation pattern for a specific presentation depending on when each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. However, with this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced simply by using data for the displacement image, so the amount of data stored in CGROM 205 can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of identifying the number of reserved first special symbols, a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of identifying the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as game-related information, a launch promotion display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or gate 41 because the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state, or a fourth pattern that can identify that a variable display is being executed, etc. may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority. In other words, they are asymmetric images for image displacement in the development suggestion performance in this feature part 006SG. Therefore, their display positions do not shift with the images in the left area 006SG005L, right area 006SG005R, and middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement, and it is possible to prevent game-related information, such as the number of reserved special symbols and the variable display of small symbols, from being difficult for the player to see when the development suggestion performance is being executed.

Furthermore, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R which slides upward during the development suggestion performance, but since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not displace, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without feeling any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, so the player can accurately recognize the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D, which identifiably displays the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U, which identifiably displays the second reserved memory number in a manner that allows the player to accurately recognize the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility and improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect. Furthermore, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by viewing the small symbols even when a development suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature part 006SG gradually increases the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R, improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect while emphasizing the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, thereby further improving the presentation effect.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Therefore, the proportion of the jackpot game state controlled varies depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion presentation. This allows the player to focus on the number of stages of movement of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion presentation, thereby increasing the presentation interest of the development suggestion presentation.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, and the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, When using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage, the part in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is the same as when using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the number of stages, etc., that the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage as a development suggestion presentation, thereby further increasing the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 14-24 and 14-25 as modified example 006SG-1, a reach suggestion effect that suggests that a reach will occur during the variable display may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the reach suggestion presentation will be explained based on Figures 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach, as shown in Figures 14-24(A) to 14-24(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-24(D) to 14-24(F), just before the right decorative symbol stops, an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol, causing the right decorative symbol to stop and reach a winning state. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative symbol is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-25(A) to 14-25(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-25(D) to 14-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern just before the right decorative pattern stops, but the right decorative pattern stops in a number of patterns that do not result in a reach combination. At this time, the right decorative pattern stops and a reach is reached. At this time, the part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

As shown in Fig. 14-26(A) to Fig. 14-26(F), the reach indication performance in this modified example 006SG-1 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of a form in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to execute a reach suggestion effect in some of the variable displays of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example of a reach suggestion effect is shown in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reach suggestion effect in a variable display of a non-reach variation pattern, it is also possible to provide a case in which the action image acts on the decorative symbols only once (only acting on the left decorative symbol).

Moreover, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of an action image such as a character acting on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple action images can be displayed as reach suggestion effects, and the rate at which a reach occurs can be varied depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, in the case where an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect but the reach does not occur, an example is given in which the decorative pattern that acted and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are not distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern that the action image acted on and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may always be distorted regardless of whether the reach occurs or not.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern affected by the action image and a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, only one of the decorative pattern affected by the action image and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may be distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-28 as modified example 006SG-2, a revival effect in which a decorative pattern that was once stopped and displayed as a losing combination changes into a winning combination may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the revival presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-27 and Fig. 14-28. First, when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 14-27 (A), the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach presentation of a normal reach or super reach, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-27(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image of the fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering and scattering is displayed, after which a new decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, and the variable display stops.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 14-28 (A), after the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach suggests that the variable display result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the center, and the decorative pattern in the center is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-28(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

However, in a variable display where the variable display result is a miss, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, the fourth stage crack is not executed, the revival performance ends, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in Figure 14-28 (A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figures 14-29(A) to 14-29(F), the revival performance in this modified example 006SG-2 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a crack effect image 006SG005H in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image (an image in which the decorative pattern inside is split into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it is diffusing).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, in this modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands as a revival effect. In other words, in the revival effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside to the display area of the image display device 5 increases gradually, so that the gradual expansion of the decorative pattern inside makes it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the revival effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is superimposed on the decorative pattern in the middle as a revival performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the crack effect image 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, blue and red are set as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more colors may be used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, an example is given of a form in which a revival effect is executed when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival effect may also be executed when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the decorative pattern in the revival performance is composed of multiple fragments, and these fragments are moved in stages from the center to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the number of fragments as the revival performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle may increase in stages as the revival performance progresses. In this way, the visual effect of the number of fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle increasing as the revival performance progresses makes a strong impression of the revival performance on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-31 as modified example 006SG-3, an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be a look-ahead preview effect that suggests from a variable display several times ago that a variable display will be executed in the variable pattern of a Super Reach in the reserved memory, or that a variable display that results in a jackpot will be executed.

The performance mode of the pre-reading preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-31. First, in a state where there are multiple reserved memories, as shown in FIG. 14-31(A) and FIG. 14-31(B), the variable display in progress stops with a combination of decorative symbols that is a miss. Next, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C) and FIG. 14-31(D), when the next variable display starts, in the display area of the image display device 5, the cutting effect image 006SG005S that crosses the display area from left to right is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols and background image. Then, the display area displayed on the image display device 5, excluding the first interface image 006SG005I, is divided into a lower area 006SG005B below including the decorative symbols and part of the background image and an upper area 006SG005T above including the remaining decorative symbols and background image, with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the boundary. In other words, the boundary between the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T above is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

As shown in Figures 14-31(D) to 14-31(E), the lower region 006SG005B simultaneously slides left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T simultaneously slides right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The lower region 006SG005B, which has slid left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, then slides downward, while the upper region 006SG005T, which has slid right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed moving so as to follow the boundary on both the lower region 006SG005B side and the upper region 006SG005T side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-31(E) and FIG. 14-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of a black image begins with the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T. The display area of the black image expands as the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T progresses, and when the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T have completed moving out of the display area, the display area appears in a so-called blacked-out state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

After this, when the blackout ends, a new background image and decorative pattern will begin to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This pre-reading preview performance will be repeated until the variable display of the outer pre-reading target begins.

As shown in Fig. 14-32(A) to Fig. 14-32(F), the preview performance in this modified example 006SG-3 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images even lower. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image including a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the look-ahead preview performance as a specific performance of the present invention, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, so that the player can more effectively recognize the left and right lateral movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the look-ahead preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and positioned in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and background image, so even if the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B are displaced, the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not displace. Therefore, by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the displacement of the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B can be made more prominent, further improving the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), by moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, and then further moving the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation can be further enhanced and the presentation interest can be increased. In particular, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary have a synergistic effect, which can further enhance the effect of the pre-reading preview.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is an up-down direction different from the right side, which is the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from either the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T or the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview performance, and the lower area 006SG005B and upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are displayed movingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result in the pre-reading target variable display becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, three colors, blue, green, and red, are set as the display colors for the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 10% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 60% of the time. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 60% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 10% of the time.

By doing this, the player can be drawn to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S that is displayed during the preview performance, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, three colors, blue, green, and red, are used as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be different depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the number of cutting effect images 006SG005S displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is given of the image displayed on the image display device 5 being divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-reading preview performance. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that moves as a pre-reading preview performance may be only one of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B, so that the pre-reading preview performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left may be the same. In this way, an element of surprise can be added to the pre-reading preview performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is the same as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance does not have to be displayed as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance. In this way, the performance interest of the look-ahead preview performance can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance (in Figure 14-31 (D) the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, and in Figure 14-31 (E) the upper area 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower area 006SG005B is moved downward), the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as part of the look-ahead preview performance, the performance effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 14-33, an example is given in which the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14-34 as modified example 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be made changeable each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be varied depending on the final display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is given as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, a promotion effect (also called a re-draw effect) may be executed in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type such as a non-variable jackpot or a 2-round variable jackpot with a small number of rounds during the variable display, and then the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and the final combination of decorative patterns that stops indicates the jackpot type.

The presentation mode of the promotion presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-35. First, the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach presentation, and then, as shown in Fig. 14-35(A), after the end of these reach presentations, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a non-variable jackpot or a two-round variable jackpot (in the example shown in Fig. 14-35(A), the combination is the even number "2" that indicates a non-variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed variably at a uniform speed as a promotion effect, including combinations of decorative symbols for other jackpot types, such as 2-round special jackpot, 5-round special jackpot, and 10-round special jackpot.

While the promotion effect is being performed, as shown in Figures 14-35(C) and 14-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left in two stages.

If the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 14-35(A)), the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(E)) after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a non- sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(F)) after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect.

In addition, the "degree of advantage to the player" between the types of jackpots in this modified example 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the number of variable display times that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends, and the number of rounds in the jackpot play.

As shown in Figures 14-36(A) to 14-36(E), the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a background image in the layer 3 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image in which the vertical center is distorted toward the left.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is an image that is longer in the left-right and up-down width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, as in the characteristic part 006SG (see FIG. 14-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-37, the left-right dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 may be the same as the left-right dimension of the display area of the image display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in Figures 14-38(A) to 14-38(C), when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, a non-image display area in which no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

In this case, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-37, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A) to FIG. 14-39(D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, or the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area is enlarged, so that a part of the background image is placed outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 due to the enlargement is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, so that the risk of inappropriate display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned non-display area, can be reduced.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the background image may be enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, an image for the promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion of the image to be displaced that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, it is not necessary to displace the image to the extent that it is outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, in the case where the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image part during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area may be enlarged in stages according to the progress of the promotion performance (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). In this way, the sense of incongruity caused by the decorative pattern and background image being suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate display such as the display of a non-image part on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the performance effect of the promotion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the reach effect of the super reach during variable display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo consecutive effect including a temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display can be executed during variable display, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of a jackpot) can be varied depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

In particular, in a variable display that executes such pseudo consecutive effects, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop just before the timing of the decorative pattern's temporary stop, or a temporary stop notification effect that notifies the user of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of modified example 006SG-5, the left and right dimensions are at least longer than the left and right dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) may be stored in advance in CGROM 205 as an image for the promotion effect, and the image may be drawn and arranged in the displacement image creation area or display image creation area to prevent the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion performance is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and a part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display image area during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a promotion performance is executed, an image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 may be arranged adjacent to the display image in a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modified example 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. In this way, when a promotion performance is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that a part of the non-display image is displayed instead of the non-display image area.

In the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-40 to 14-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these tentative stop suggestion effects and tentative stop notification effects may be executed as effects in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the tentative stop suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40(A), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) and a reach is reached. After that, as a tentative stop suggestion presentation, a pseudo consecutive symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is part of the decorative symbol, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a ripple effect image 006SG005P converging from the periphery of the display area to the center of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decorative symbols and the background image) is displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(B), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(C), the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, but move downward in the display area of the image display device 5 and become invisible, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a miss is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, a form is exemplified in which a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 to suggest that the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) will temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display forms for the ripple effect image 006SG005P may be provided, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops may be varied depending on which display form the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed in as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 14-41, it is possible to provide a case where only one ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops can be varied according to the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the decorative pattern, in other words, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern and a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 14-42(A) and 14-42(B), after the temporary stop indication effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed diffusing from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the periphery of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the decorative symbols on the left and right and the background image) is displayed distorted.

As shown in Figures 14-43(A) to 14-43(F), the temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in this modified example 006SG-6 are as follows: a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area; a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area; and decorative patterns including pseudo consecutive patterns are drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-6 for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (decorative pattern and background image distorted by ripple effect image 006SG005P) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006GS, an example was given of a form in which a performance image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only planar images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 14-44 and 14-45 as modified example 006SG-7, a performance image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying stereoscopic images.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. Note that in the characteristic part 006SG and the modification described above, an example is given of a form in which a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) capable of displaying planar images (2D images) is used as the image display device 5, but the feature of this modification 006SG-7 is that, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used that allows the player to view stereoscopic images with the naked eye using a parallax barrier method, making it possible to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 14-44, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 has a structure including an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 with a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is a relatively optically transparent liquid crystal panel that allows for a parallax barrier image display state in which a parallax barrier image is displayed, which has vertically striped black sections that act as shutters to prevent the right eye image (R image) displayed in the vertically long stripes on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 from being seen by the left eye of the player and the left eye image (L image) from being seen by the right eye of the player, and transparent sections that allow the right eye image to be seen by the right eye of the player and the left eye image to be seen by the left eye of the player, and a transparent display state in which all pixels are transparent and do not have vertically striped black sections.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 can display, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of a left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier image described above is made non-display (fully transparent display) on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, so that a planar image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of this modified example 006SG-7, can display a naked-eye stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image.

The stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the layers described above, just like the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When such a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used to display a performance image, during variable display, other performances may be executed by displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) at a timing different from the specific performance (e.g., development suggestion performance) in the present invention.

As shown in Figures 14-45(A) to 14-45(D), during variable display, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is capable of executing a specific effect in which the image of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moving upward as displacement specific images, and the image of the center area 006SG005C moving downward as described above, and a variable display preview effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a preview effect whose execution period does not overlap with the development suggestion effect, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview effect.

In other words, when a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced specific images and move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is moved downward, are displayed, only the planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and right region 006SG005R moving upward as a displacement specific image, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moving downward as an image are displayed, the display is made to be a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, and thus preventing a decrease in the interest of the presentation.

In this embodiment, since the execution period of the performance in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed differs from that of the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which displacement specific images, images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moved upward, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward, are displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same performance, data such as a display in progress flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed may be stored so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed, and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted based on the data. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent a stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image has ended, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag for a specified period before and after the period during which the displacement specific image is displayed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic images (3D images) may be displayed using naked eye stereoscopic image display devices using a lenticular lens method or integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG0-7, a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance may also be provided. In addition, if a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) can be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) that is higher than the image drawing area in which the planar image (2D image) is drawn and arranged. In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) can be displayed preferably in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-7, as an example of a form in which a variable display preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot can be executed in a period different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect) as an effect that displays a stereoscopic image (3D image), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as an introduction effect for the development suggestion effect (specific effect) in a period prior to the development suggestion effect (specific effect). In this way, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) can make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Furthermore, multiple presentation modes for the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be different depending on which presentation mode the introduction effect is executed in.

In addition, the introduction performance may be performed by operating the movable body 32, and the effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance) may be improved by coordinating the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (corresponding to the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J in the characteristic part 006SG) may display medal payout display, remaining number of games in the AT (assist time), medal display stored as credits, etc. together with the presentation image on the image display device 5, and these game-related information may be treated as non-target images for displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each of the modified examples, an example is given of a form in which a special effect of the present invention is performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed or distorted (distorted), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect may be performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is repeatedly changed or distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, the development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention, but multiple effects may be executed as these specific effects. In addition, when multiple specific effects are executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, an effect in which the decorative pattern (characters and numbers) such as the development suggestion effect is not divided can be executed in the normal state, while an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into multiple pieces or display areas such as the revival effect and look-ahead notice effect can be executed. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the decorative pattern including characters and numbers not being divided, and conversely, in the time-saving state, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by dividing the decorative pattern of only numbers.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and is composed of only numbers in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed midway through the variable display in a specific variable pattern, such as the variable display in the variable pattern of a super reach. For example, in the variable display of a super reach, a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of characters and numbers may be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of only numbers may be executed during the period after the reach. Furthermore, during the period after the reach, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is divided, such as a revival effect, as a specific effect in this invention.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, an example is given of an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction and displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5. In other words, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in Fig. 14-3 and Fig. 14-4, a form of generating a displacement image by a replacement method in which pixel X corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is identified from a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a displacement image may be generated by a method (movement method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image in the displacement target image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and G value of the pixel A. Note that, in the replacement method, as in modified example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary of the area with different movement directions, whereas in the case of the replacement method, such editing is not necessary, so that the load of creating the image can be reduced, and in addition, when an effect image or the like is placed on the boundary, the degree of freedom of setting the boundary where the effect image is placed can be increased, so that the load of creating the image including the effect image can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, capable of displaying a display image of game-related information relating to the progress of a game in the display area, and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each of the images arranged on the plurality of display layers in the display area;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a start condition,
the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that light emission from the light-emitting means is recognizable by a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode, and a special mode,
The special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode having a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special mode,
The specific display of the special aspect can be changed to either the first special aspect or the second special aspect,
The rate at which the specific display of the special mode is displayed when the specific light-emitting performance is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific display of the first special mode is displayed when the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and the light emission is terminated at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance is terminated.
When the light emission of the light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, a special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the light-emitting means at a specific end timing that is later than the specified end timing;
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image on a specific display layer,
The display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images